blob: c38164e6bd1047a93bcddac5859cf9375a5cb84a [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000025#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie2be39222018-03-21 22:34:23 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000032#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000036#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000037#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000038#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
47#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000051#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
54#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000055#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000057#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000059#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000060#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
61#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
62#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000063#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000064#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000065#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000066#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000067#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000068#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000070#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000071#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000072#include <cassert>
73#include <climits>
74#include <cstddef>
75#include <cstdint>
76#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000077#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000078#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000079#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000080#include <utility>
81#include <vector>
82
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000083using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000084using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000085
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000086#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
87
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000088// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
89// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
90// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
91// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000092static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
93 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
94 cl::desc(
95 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
96
97static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
98 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
99 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000100
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000101static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000102 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000104
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000108
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000109static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
110 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
111 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
112 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
113 "predicated store"));
114
115static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
116 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
117 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
118 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
119
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000120static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
121 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
122 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
123 "executed"));
124
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000125static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
126 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
127 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
128 "speculatively executed instructions"));
129
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000130STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
133STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
134 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
135STATISTIC(
136 NumLookupTablesHoles,
137 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000138STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
140 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000141STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000142
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000143namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000144
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
146// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
147// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000148using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
149 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
152// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
153// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000154using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
157struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
158 ConstantInt *Value;
159 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000161 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000162 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
165 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
166 return Value < RHS.Value;
167 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000168
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000169 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
170};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000171
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000173 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000174 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000175 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
177
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000178 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000179 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
180 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000182 BasicBlock *Pred,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
185 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000186
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000187 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000188 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000189 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
190 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000191 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000193 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000194 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000195 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
196 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000197
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000198public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000199 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000200 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000201 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000202 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000203
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
205};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
207} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000208
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000209/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000211static bool
212SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000213 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000214 if (SI1 == SI2)
215 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000216
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000217 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
218 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
219 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
220 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
221 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000222
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
224 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000225 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
226 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
227 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
229 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
231 if (FailBlocks)
232 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
233 Fail = true;
234 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000236
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000237 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
241/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
242/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000243static bool
244isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
245 Instruction *Cond,
246 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
247 if (SI1 == SI2)
248 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
250
251 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000252 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
254 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
255 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
256 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000257 if (!Ci2)
258 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
260 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
261 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
262 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
263 return false;
264
265 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
266 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
269 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
272 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000273 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000274 return false;
275 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
276 }
277 return true;
278}
279
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000280/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
281/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
282/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
283/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000284static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
285 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000286 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
287 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000288}
289
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000290/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
291/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
292/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000293/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000294static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000295 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000296 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000297 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000298 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000299}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000300
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000301/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
302/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000303/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
304/// which works well enough for us.
305///
306/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000307/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
308/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
309/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
310/// set and true is returned.
311///
312/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
313/// Select whose cost is 2.
314///
315/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
316/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
317/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000318static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000320 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
322 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000323 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
324 // so limit the recursion depth.
325 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
326 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
327 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
328 return false;
329
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000330 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000331 if (!I) {
332 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
333 // can be executed unconditionally.
334 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
335 if (C->canTrap())
336 return false;
337 return true;
338 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000340
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000341 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000342 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000343 if (PBB == BB)
344 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000345
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
347 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000348 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
349 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000350 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000351 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000352
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000353 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
354 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000355 if (!AggressiveInsts)
356 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000357
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000358 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
360 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000361
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000362 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
363 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
364 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000369
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000370 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
371 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
372 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
373 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
374 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
375 // enabled further IR optimizations.
376 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
377 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000378 return false;
379
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000380 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
381 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382
383 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
384 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000385 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000386 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
387 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000388 return false;
389 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
390 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000391 return true;
392}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000393
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000394/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000395/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000396static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000397 // Normal constant int.
398 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000399 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000400 return CI;
401
402 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
403 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000404 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000405
406 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
407 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
408 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
409
410 // IntToPtr const int.
411 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
412 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
413 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
414 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
415 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
416 return CI;
417 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000418 return cast<ConstantInt>(
419 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000420 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000421 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000422}
423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000425
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000426/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
427/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
428/// structure.
429/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
430/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
431/// representing the different cases for the switch.
432/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
433/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
434/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
435/// fail.
436struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000437 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000438
439 /// Value found for the switch comparison
440 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
441
442 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
443 Value *Extra = nullptr;
444
445 /// Set of integers to match in switch
446 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
447
448 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
449 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000450
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000452 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000453 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000454 }
455
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000458 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000459
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
462 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
463 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000464 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
465 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000466 CompValue = NewVal;
467 return (CompValue != nullptr);
468 }
469
470 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
471 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
472 /// match depending on isEQ).
473 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
474 /// against is placed in CompValue.
475 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
476 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000477 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000478 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
479 ICmpInst *ICI;
480 ConstantInt *C;
481 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000482 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000483 return false;
484 }
485
486 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000487 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488
489 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000490 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000491 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000492 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000493 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
494 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
495
496 /*
497 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
498 x : BITVECTOR(64);
499 y : BITVECTOR(64);
500 z : BITVECTOR(64);
501 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
502 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
503 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
504 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000505 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
506 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
507 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000508 */
509
510 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
511 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
512 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
514 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
515 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
516 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
517
518 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
519 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
520 //
521 // mask = (1 << z)
522 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
523 //
524 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
525 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
526
527 // Pattern match a special case:
528 /*
529 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
530 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
531 );
532 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000534 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
535 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000536 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000538 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 return false;
540
541 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000543 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
544 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000545 UsedICmps++;
546 return true;
547 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000548 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000550 // Pattern match a special case:
551 /*
552 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
553 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
554 );
555 */
556 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
557 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
558 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
559 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
560 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
561 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
562 return false;
563
564 Vals.push_back(C);
565 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
566 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
567 UsedICmps++;
568 return true;
569 }
570 }
571
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000573 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000574 return false;
575
576 UsedICmps++;
577 Vals.push_back(C);
578 return ICI->getOperand(0);
579 }
580
581 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000582 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
583 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584
585 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
586 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
587 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000588 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
589 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
591 }
592
593 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
594 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
595 // x != 0 && x != 1.
596 if (!isEQ)
597 Span = Span.inverse();
598
599 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000600 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000602 }
603
604 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000605 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000606 return false;
607
608 // Add all values from the range to the set
609 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
610 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000611
612 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000613 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000614 }
615
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000616 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
618 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
619 /// vector.
620 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000621 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000622 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
623 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000624
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
626 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000627 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000630 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000631 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000633 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000634 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000635
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000636 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
637 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
638 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000639 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
640 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
641 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
642 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000643 continue;
644 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000647 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000648 // Match succeed, continue the loop
649 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000650 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
653 // comparison against the same value as the others.
654 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
655 if (!Extra) {
656 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000657 continue;
658 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000659 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
660 CompValue = nullptr;
661 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000662 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000663 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000664};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000665
666} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000667
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000668static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000669 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000670 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
671 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
672 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
673 if (BI->isConditional())
674 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000675 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
676 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000677 }
678
679 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000680 if (Cond)
681 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000682}
683
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000684/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000685/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000686Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000687 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000688 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
689 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
690 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +0000691 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * pred_size(SI->getParent()) <= 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000692 CV = SI->getCondition();
693 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000694 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000695 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000696 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000697 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000698 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000699
700 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000701 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000702 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
703 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000704 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000705 CV = Ptr;
706 }
707 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000708 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000709}
710
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000711/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000712/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000713BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
714 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000715 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000716 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000717 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
718 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
719 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000720 return SI->getDefaultDest();
721 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000722
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000723 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000724 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000725 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000726 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
727 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000728 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000729}
730
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000731/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000732/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000733static void
734EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
735 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000736 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000737}
738
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000739/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000740static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
741 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000742 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
743
744 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
745 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
746 std::swap(V1, V2);
747
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000748 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000749 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000750 if (V1->size() == 1) {
751 // Just scan V2.
752 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
753 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
754 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
755 return true;
756 }
757
758 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
759 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
760 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
761 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
762 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
763 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
764 return true;
765 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
766 ++i1;
767 else
768 ++i2;
769 }
770 return false;
771}
772
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000773// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
774// least one non-zero weight.
775static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
776 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
777 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
778 MDNode *N = nullptr;
779 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
780 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
781 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
782}
783
784// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
785// exactly 2 weights.
786static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
787 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
788 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
789 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
790 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
791 MDNode *N = nullptr;
792 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
793 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
794 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
795 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
796}
797
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000798/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
799/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
800/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
801/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
802/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000803bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
804 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000805 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000806 if (!PredVal)
807 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000808
809 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
810 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000811 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
812 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000813
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000814 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
815 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
816
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000817 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000819 BasicBlock *PredDef =
820 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
821 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000822
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000823 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000824 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000825 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000826 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827
828 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
829 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
830 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
831 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
832 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
833 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000834 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000835 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000836
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000837 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
838 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
839 // uncond br.
840 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
841 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000842 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000843 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000844
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000845 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000847
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000848 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
849 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
850 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000851
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000852 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
853 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000854 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000855
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000856 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
857 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000858 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000859 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
860 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000861
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000862 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
863 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000864
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000865 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
866 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000867 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000868 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
869 if (HasWeight)
870 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
871 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000872 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000873 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
874 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000875 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
876 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000877 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000878 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000879 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000880 Weights.pop_back();
881 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000882 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000883 SI->removeCase(i);
884 }
885 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000886 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000887 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000888
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000889 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000890 return true;
891 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000892
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000893 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
894 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000895 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000896 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000897 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
898 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000899 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000900 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000901 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
902 }
903 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000904
905 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
906 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000907 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000908 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
909 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
910 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
911 break;
912 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000913
914 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000915 if (!TheRealDest)
916 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000917
918 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
919 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000920 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
921 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
922 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000923 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000924 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000925
926 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000927 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000928 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000929
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000930 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
931 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
932 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000933
934 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
935 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000936}
937
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000938namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000939
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000940/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
941/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
942/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
943struct ConstantIntOrdering {
944 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
945 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
946 }
947};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000948
949} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000950
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000951static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
952 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
953 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
954 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000955 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000956 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000957 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000958}
959
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000960static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000961 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000962 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000963 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000964 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
965
966 return false;
967}
968
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000969/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
970/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
971/// metadata.
972static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
973 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000974 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000975 assert(MD);
976 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000977 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000978 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000979 }
980
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000981 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
982 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
983 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000984 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000985 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
986 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
987 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
988 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000989 }
990}
991
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000992/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000993static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000994 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
995 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
996 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
997 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
998 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000999 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001000}
1001
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001002/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1003/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001004/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1005/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001006bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1007 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001009 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1011 bool Changed = false;
1012
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001015 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001016
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1018 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001019 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001020
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001021 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001022 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001023 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1024 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001025 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001026 return false;
1027 }
1028 }
1029
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001030 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001031 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1033
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001034 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001035 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1036
1037 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1038 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1039 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001040 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001041
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001042 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1043 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001044 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1045 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1046
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001047 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001048 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001049 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001050 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1051 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1052 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001053 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1054 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1055 // successor's weights
1056 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001057
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001058 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001059 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001060 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001061 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001062 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1063 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1064 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001065 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001066
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001067 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1068 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1069 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001070 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001071 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1072 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1073 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1074 else {
1075 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1076 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001077
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001078 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1079 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1081 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001082 Weights.pop_back();
1083 }
1084
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001085 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001086 --i;
1087 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001088 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001089
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001090 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001091 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1092 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1093 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1094 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1095 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001096
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001097 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1098 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001099 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1100 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1101 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1102 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1103 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001104 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1105 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1106 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1107 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1109 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001110 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001111 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001112
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001113 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1114 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1115 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1116 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1117 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1118 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1119 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1120 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001121 } else {
1122 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1123 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1124 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001125 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1126 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001127 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1128 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1129 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001130
1131 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001132 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1133 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001134 Weights.pop_back();
1135 }
1136
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001137 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1138 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001139 --i;
1140 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001141 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001142
1143 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1144 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001145 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1146 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1147 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001148 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1149 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001150 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1151 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001152 PTIHandled.erase(
1153 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001154 }
1155
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001156 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1157 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001158 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001159 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001160 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1161 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001162 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001163 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001164 }
1165
1166 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1167 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1168 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001169 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1170 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001171
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001172 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001173 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001174 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001175 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001176 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001177 }
1178
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001179 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001180 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1181 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001182 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001183 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1184 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001185
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001186 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1187 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1188 FitWeights(Weights);
1189
1190 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1191
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001192 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001193 }
1194
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001195 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001196
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001197 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1198 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1199 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001200 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001201 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1202 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001203 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001204 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001205 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001206 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1207 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001208 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001209 }
1210 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1211 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001212
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001213 Changed = true;
1214 }
1215 }
1216 return Changed;
1217}
1218
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001219// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1220// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1221// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001222static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1223 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001224 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001225 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1226 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1227 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001228 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001229 return false;
1230 }
1231 }
1232 }
1233 return true;
1234}
1235
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001236static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1237
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001238/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1239/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1240/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001241static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001242 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001243 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1244 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1245 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1246 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1247 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001248 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1249 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001250
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001251 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1252 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1253
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001254 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001255 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1256 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1257 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1258 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1259 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1260 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1261 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1262 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1263 }
1264 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1265 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1266 return false;
1267
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001268 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001269
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001270 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001271 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001272 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1273 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1274 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1275 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001276
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001277 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1278 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1279 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1280 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1281 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1282 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1283 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1284 if (C1 && C2)
1285 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001286 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001287
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001288 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1289 return Changed;
1290
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001291 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1292 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1293 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1294 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1295 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1296 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1297 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1298 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1299 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1300 Changed = true;
1301 } else {
1302 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1303 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1304 // the now redundant second instruction.
1305 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1306 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1307 if (!I2->use_empty())
1308 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1309 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1310 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1311 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1312 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1313 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1314 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1315 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1319 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
1320 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001321
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001322 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1323 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1324 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001325
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001326 I2->eraseFromParent();
1327 Changed = true;
1328 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001329
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001330 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1331 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001332 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1333 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1334 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1335 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1336 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1337 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1338 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1339 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1340 }
1341 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1342
1343 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001344
1345HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001346 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1347 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001348 return Changed;
1349
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001350 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001351 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1352 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1353 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001354 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1355 continue;
1356
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001357 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1358 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001359 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1360 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001361 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001362
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001363 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001364 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001365 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001366 return Changed;
1367 }
1368 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001369
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001370 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001371 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001372 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001373 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001374 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1375 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001376 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001377 }
1378
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001379 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001380 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1381 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1382 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1383 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001384 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001385 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001386 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1387 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1388 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001389 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1390 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001391
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001392 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1393 // that determines the right value.
1394 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001395 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001396 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1397 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1398 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001399
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001400 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001401 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1402 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1403 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001404 }
1405 }
1406
1407 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001408 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1409 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001410
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001411 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001412 return true;
1413}
1414
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001415// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1416// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1417// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1418// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1419// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1420static bool canSinkInstructions(
1421 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1422 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001423 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1424 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1425 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1426 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1427 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1428 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1429 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1430 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001431
1432 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1433 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1434 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1435 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1436 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1437 return false;
1438
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001439 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1440 // have no uses.
1441 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1442 return false;
1443 }
1444
1445 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1446 for (auto *I : Insts)
1447 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1448 return false;
1449
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001450 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1451 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1452 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1453 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001454 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1455 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001456 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001457 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001458 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001459 return (PNUse &&
1460 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1461 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1462 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001463 }))
1464 return false;
1465 }
1466
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001467 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1468 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1469 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1470 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1471 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1472 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1473 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1474 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1475 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1476 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1477 }))
1478 return false;
1479 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1480 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1481 }))
1482 return false;
1483
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001484 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1485 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1486 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1487 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001488
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001489 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001490 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1491 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001492 };
1493 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1494 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1495 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1496 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001497 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1498 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001499 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1500 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001501 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001502 for (auto *I : Insts)
1503 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504 }
1505 }
1506 return true;
1507}
1508
1509// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1510// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1511// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001512static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001513 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1514
1515 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1516 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1517 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001518 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1519 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1520 do {
1521 I = I->getPrevNode();
1522 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1523 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1524 Insts.push_back(I);
1525 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001526
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001527 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1528 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1529 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1530 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001531 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001532 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1533 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1534 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1535 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1536 return U == PNUse;
1537 }))
1538 return false;
1539 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001540
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001541 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1542 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001543 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1544 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1545 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1546 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1547 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1548 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1549 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1550 // small mess we may make.
1551 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1552 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1553 });
1554 if (!NeedPHI) {
1555 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1556 continue;
1557 }
1558
1559 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1560 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1561 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1562 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1563 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1564 for (auto *I : Insts)
1565 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1566 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1567 }
1568
1569 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1570 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1571 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1572 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1573 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1574
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001575 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001576 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001577 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001578 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1579 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1580 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1581 // loop below.
1582 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1583 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1584 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1585 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001586 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001587 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1588 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001589
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001590 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1591 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1592 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1593 // instruction and nuke it.
1594 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1595 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1596 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1597 PN->eraseFromParent();
1598 }
1599
1600 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1601 for (auto *I : Insts)
1602 if (I != I0)
1603 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001604
1605 return true;
1606}
1607
1608namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001609
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001610 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1611 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1612 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1613 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1614 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1615 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1616 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1617 // ...
1618 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1619 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1620 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1621 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001622
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001623 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001624 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001625 reset();
1626 }
1627
1628 void reset() {
1629 Fail = false;
1630 Insts.clear();
1631 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001632 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1633 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1634 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1635 if (!Inst) {
1636 // Block wasn't big enough.
1637 Fail = true;
1638 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001639 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001640 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001641 }
1642 }
1643
1644 bool isValid() const {
1645 return !Fail;
1646 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001647
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001648 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001649 if (Fail)
1650 return;
1651 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001652 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1653 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001654 // Already at beginning of block.
1655 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001656 Fail = true;
1657 return;
1658 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001659 }
1660 }
1661
1662 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1663 return Insts;
1664 }
1665 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001666
1667} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001668
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001669/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1670/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1671/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1672/// than one).
1673static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001674 // We support two situations:
1675 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1676 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1677 //
1678 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1679 // else-if patterns;
1680 //
1681 // if (a) f(1);
1682 // else if (b) f(2);
1683 //
1684 // produces:
1685 //
1686 // [if]
1687 // / \
1688 // [f(1)] [if]
1689 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001690 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001691 // | [f(2)]|
1692 // \ | /
1693 // [ end ]
1694 //
1695 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1696 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1697 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1698 //
1699 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1700 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1701 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1702 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1703 //
1704 // [if]
1705 // / \
1706 // [x(1)] [if]
1707 // | | \
1708 // | | \
1709 // | [x(2)] |
1710 // \ / |
1711 // [sink.split] |
1712 // \ /
1713 // [ end ]
1714 //
1715 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1716 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001717 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001718 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1719 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1720 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1721 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1722 Cond = T;
1723 else
1724 return false;
1725 }
1726 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001727 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001728
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001729 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001730 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1731 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1732 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1733 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1734 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1735 // PHIOperands.
1736 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1737 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1738 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001739 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001740 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1741 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001742 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1743 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001744 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1745 ++ScanIdx;
1746 --LRI;
1747 }
1748
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001749 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001750 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1751 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1752 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1753 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1754 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001755 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001756 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1757 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1758 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001759
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001760 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1761 };
1762
1763 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001764 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1765 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1766 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1767 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1768 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1769 LRI.reset();
1770 unsigned Idx = 0;
1771 bool Profitable = false;
1772 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1773 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1774 Profitable = true;
1775 break;
1776 }
1777 --LRI;
1778 ++Idx;
1779 }
1780 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001781 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001782
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001783 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001784 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1785 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001786 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001787 // Edges couldn't be split.
1788 return false;
1789 Changed = true;
1790 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001791
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001792 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1793 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1794 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1795 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1796 // per sunk instruction).
1797 //
1798 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1799 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1800 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1801 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1802 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1803 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1804 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001805 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1806 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1807 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001808
1809 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1810 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001811 LRI.reset();
1812 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001813 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001814 LLVM_DEBUG(
1815 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001816 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001817 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001818
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001819 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001820 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001821 NumSinkCommons++;
1822 Changed = true;
1823 }
1824 return Changed;
1825}
1826
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001827/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001828/// conditional block.
1829///
1830/// We are looking for code like the following:
1831/// BrBB:
1832/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1833/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1834/// ... // function).
1835/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1836/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1837/// ThenBB:
1838/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1839/// br label EndBB
1840/// EndBB:
1841/// ...
1842/// We are going to transform this into:
1843/// BrBB:
1844/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1845/// ... //
1846/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1847/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1848/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1849/// ...
1850///
1851/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1852/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001853static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1854 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001855 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1856 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001857 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001858
1859 // Volatile or atomic.
1860 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001861 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001862
1863 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1864
1865 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001866 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001867 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001868 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1869 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001870 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001871
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001872 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001873 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001874 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001875
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001876 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1877 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1878 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1879 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1880 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001881 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001882 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001883 }
1884
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001885 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001886}
1887
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001888/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001889///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001890/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1891/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1892/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1893/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1894/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1895///
1896/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1897/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1898/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1899/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1900///
1901///
1902/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1903/// \code
1904/// BB:
1905/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1906/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1907/// ThenBB:
1908/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001909/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001910/// EndBB:
1911/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1912/// ...
1913/// \endcode
1914///
1915/// Into this IR:
1916/// \code
1917/// BB:
1918/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1919/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1920/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1921/// ...
1922/// \endcode
1923///
1924/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001925static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001926 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001927 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1928 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1929 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1930 return false;
1931
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001932 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1933 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1934
1935 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1936 // to swap the select operands later.
1937 bool Invert = false;
1938 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1939 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1940 Invert = true;
1941 }
1942 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1943
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001944 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1945 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1946 // - They are defined in BB, and
1947 // - They have no side effects, and
1948 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1949 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1950
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001951 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1952
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001953 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001954 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1955 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001956 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001957 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001958 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001959 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001960 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001961 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1962 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001963 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001964 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001965
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001966 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001967 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001968 ++SpeculationCost;
1969 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001970 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001971
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001972 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001973 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1974 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1975 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001976 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001977 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001978 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1979 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001980 return false;
1981
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001982 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1983 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1984 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1985
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001986 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001987 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001988 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001989 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001990 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001991 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001992 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1993
1994 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001995 }
1996 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001997
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001998 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1999 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2000 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002001 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2002 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2003 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002004 I != E; ++I)
2005 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002006 ++SpeculationCost;
2007 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002008 return false;
2009 }
2010
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002011 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2012 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002013 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2014 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2015 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002016
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002017 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002018 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002019 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002020 continue;
2021
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002022 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002023 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2024 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002025 return false;
2026
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002027 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002028 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2029 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2030 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002031 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2032
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002033 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2034 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002035 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002036 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2037 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002038 unsigned MaxCost =
2039 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002040 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002041 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002042
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002043 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2044 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2045 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002046 // constant expression.
2047 ++SpeculationCost;
2048 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002049 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002050 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002051
2052 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2053 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002054 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002055 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002056
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002057 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002058 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002059
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002060 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2061 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002062 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002063 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2064 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2065 if (Invert)
2066 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002067 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002068 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002069 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002070 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2071 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002072 }
2073
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002074 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2075 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002076 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002077 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2078
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002079 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002080 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2081 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002082
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002083 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002084 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002085 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2086 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2087 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2088 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2089 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002090
2091 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2092 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2093 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002094
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002095 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002096 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2097 // destinations were inverted.
2098 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002099 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002100 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002101 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002102 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002103 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2104 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002105 }
2106
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002107 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2108 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2109 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2110 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2111 I->eraseFromParent();
2112
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002113 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002114 return true;
2115}
2116
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002117/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002118static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002119 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002120
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002121 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002122 if (Size > 10)
2123 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002124 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002125
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002126 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002127 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002128 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002129 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2131 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002132 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002134 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2135 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002136
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002137 return true;
2138}
2139
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002140/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2141/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2142/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002143static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2144 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002145 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2146 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002147 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2148 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002149 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2150 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002151
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002152 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2153 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002154 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002155 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002156 }
2157
2158 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002159 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2160 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002161
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002162 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002163 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002164 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2165 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2166 }))
2167 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002168
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002169 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2170 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002171 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002172 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002173 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2174 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002176 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2177 // branch to RealDest.
2178 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2179 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002181 if (RealDest == BB)
2182 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002183 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002184 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2185 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002186
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2188 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2189 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2190 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002191 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2192 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2193 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002194 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002196 // Update PHI nodes.
2197 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002198
2199 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2200 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2201 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2202 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002203 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002204 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2205 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2206 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2207 continue;
2208 }
2209 // Clone the instruction.
2210 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002211 if (BBI->hasName())
2212 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002213
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002214 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002215 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2216 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002217 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2218 *i = PI->second;
2219 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002220
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002221 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002222 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002223 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2224 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2225 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002226 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002227 N = nullptr;
2228 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002230 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002231 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002232 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002233 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2234 if (N)
2235 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002236
2237 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2238 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2239 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2240 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 }
2242
2243 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2244 // to EdgeBB instead.
2245 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2246 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2247 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2248 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2249 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2250 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002251
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002252 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002253 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002254 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002255
2256 return false;
2257}
2258
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002259/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2260/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002261static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2262 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002263 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2264 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2265 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2266 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2267 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2268 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002269 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002270 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2271 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2272 return false;
2273
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002274 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2275 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002276 if (!IfCond ||
2277 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2278 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2279 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002281 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2282 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2283 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2284 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2285 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2286 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2287 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2288 if (NumPhis > 2)
2289 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002290
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002291 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2292 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2293 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002294 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002295 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2296 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002297 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2298 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002299
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002300 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2301 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002302 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002303 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002304 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002305 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002306 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002307
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002308 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002309 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002310 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002311 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002312 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002313 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002315 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002316 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2317 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002318 if (!PN)
2319 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002320
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002321 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2322 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2323 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2324 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2325 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2326 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2327 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002328
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002329 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2330 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2331 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2332 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002333 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002334 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2335 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2336 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002337 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002338 } else {
2339 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002340 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2341 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002342 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002343 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002344 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2345 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002346 return false;
2347 }
2348 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002349
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002350 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002351 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002352 } else {
2353 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002354 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2355 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002356 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002358 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2359 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002360 return false;
2361 }
2362 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002364 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2365 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2366 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002367
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002368 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2369 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002370 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002371 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002372
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002373 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2374 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002375 if (IfBlock1) {
2376 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2377 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002378 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002379 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002380 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002381 }
2382 if (IfBlock2) {
2383 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2384 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002385 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002386 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002387 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002388 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002389
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002390 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2391 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002392 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002393 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002394
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002395 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2396 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2397 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002398 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002399 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002400
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002401 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2402 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2403 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2404 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002405 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2406 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002407 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002408 return true;
2409}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002410
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002411/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2412/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002413/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002414static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002415 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002416 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2417 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2418 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2419 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2420 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002421
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002422 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2423 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2424 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002425 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002426 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002427 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002428 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002429
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002430 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002431 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2432 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2433 // branch into a return.
2434 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2435 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2436 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002437 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002438 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002439 return true;
2440 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002441
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002442 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2443 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2444 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2445 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002446
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002447 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2448 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2449 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2450 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2451 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2452 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2453 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002454
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002455 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2456 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2457 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2458 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2459 // safe.
2460 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2461 if (TCV->canTrap())
2462 return false;
2463 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2464 if (FCV->canTrap())
2465 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002466
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002467 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2468 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2469 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2470 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002471
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002472 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2473 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002474 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002475 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002476 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2477 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2478 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2479 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002480 TrueValue =
2481 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002482 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002483 }
2484
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002485 Value *RI =
2486 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002487
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002488 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002489
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002490 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2491 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2492 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002493
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002494 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2495
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002496 return true;
2497}
2498
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002499/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002500/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002501static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002502 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2503 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002504 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2505 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002506 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2507 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2508 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2509 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2510 return true;
2511 }
2512 }
2513 return false;
2514}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002515
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002516/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2517/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2518/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2519static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2520 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2521 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2522 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2523 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2524 bool PredHasWeights =
2525 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2526 bool SuccHasWeights =
2527 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2528 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2529 if (!PredHasWeights)
2530 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2531 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2532 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2533 return true;
2534 } else {
2535 return false;
2536 }
2537}
2538
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002539/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2540/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2541/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002542bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002543 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002544
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002545 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002546 if (BI->isConditional())
2547 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2548 else {
2549 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2550 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002551 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002552 // predecessor.
2553 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2554 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2555 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2556 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2557 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002558 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2559 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2560 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002561 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002562 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2563 Cond = Curr;
2564 break;
2565 }
2566 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002567 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002568 return false;
2569 }
2570 }
2571
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002572 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002573 return false;
2574 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002575
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002576 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2577 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002578 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002579
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002580 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002581 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002582
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002583 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002584 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2585 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002586
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002587 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002588 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002589
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002590 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2591 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2592 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2593 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2594 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2595 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002596 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002597 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2598 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2599 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002600 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002601 return false;
2602 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2603 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2604 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2605 return false;
2606 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2607 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2608 // and Cond.
2609 ++NumBonusInsts;
2610 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2611 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2612 return false;
2613 }
2614
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002615 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2616 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2617 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2618 if (CE->canTrap())
2619 return false;
2620 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2621 if (CE->canTrap())
2622 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002623
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002624 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002625 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002626 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002627 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2628 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002629
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002630 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2631 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002632 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002633
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002634 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2635 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2636 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002637 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002638 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002639 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002640 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2641 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002642 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002643
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002644 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002645 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002646 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002647
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002648 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002649 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002650 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002651 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002652 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002653 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2654 Opc = Instruction::And;
2655 InvertPredCond = true;
2656 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2657 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2658 InvertPredCond = true;
2659 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002660 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002661 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002662 } else {
2663 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2664 continue;
2665 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002666
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002667 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002668 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002669
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002670 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2671 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002672 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002673
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002674 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2675 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2676 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2677 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002678 NewCond =
2679 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002680 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002681
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002682 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002683 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002684 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002685
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002686 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002687 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002688 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2689 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2690 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002691 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002692 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002693 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002694 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2695 continue;
2696 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2697 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002698 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002699 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002700
2701 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2702 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2703 // only given the branch precondition.
2704 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2705 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002706 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002707
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002708 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2709 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002710 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002711 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002712
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002713 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2714 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002715 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002716 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002717 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002718 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002719 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002720 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002721
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002722 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002723 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2724 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002725 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2726
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002727 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002728 bool HasWeights =
2729 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2730 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002731 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2732
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002733 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002734 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002735 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2736 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002737 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002738 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002739 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002740 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2741 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2742 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002743 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2744 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2745 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002746 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002747 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2748 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2749 }
2750 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002751 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2753 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002754 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002755 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002756 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2757 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2758 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2759 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002760 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2761 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002762 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2763 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2764 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002765 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2766 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2767 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2768
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002769 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2770 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002771 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002772 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002773 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002774 } else {
2775 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2776 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002777 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002778 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002779 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002780 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002781 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2782 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2783 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2784 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002785 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2786 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2787 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2788 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002789 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002790 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2791 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002792 } else {
2793 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2794 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2795 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002796 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2797 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002798 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002799 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2800 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2801 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2802 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002803 }
2804 }
2805 // Update PHI Node.
2806 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2807 MergedCond);
2808 }
2809 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2810 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2811 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2812 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002813 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002814
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002815 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2816 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2817 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2818 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2819
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002820 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2821 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2822
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002823 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002824 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2825 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2826 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002827
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002828 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002829 }
2830 return false;
2831}
2832
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002833// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2834// nullptr.
2835static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2836 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2837 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2838 if (!BB)
2839 continue;
2840 for (auto &I : *BB)
2841 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2842 if (S)
2843 // Multiple stores seen.
2844 return nullptr;
2845 else
2846 S = SI;
2847 }
2848 }
2849 return S;
2850}
2851
2852static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2853 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2854 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2855 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2856 //
2857 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2858 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2859 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2860 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2861 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2862 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2863 // one.
2864 //
2865 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2866 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2867 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2868 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2869 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002870
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002871 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2872 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2873 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2874 if (!AlternativeV)
2875 break;
2876
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00002877 assert(pred_size(Succ) == 2);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002878 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2879 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2880 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2881 break;
2882 PHI = nullptr;
2883 }
2884 if (PHI)
2885 return PHI;
2886
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002887 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2888 if (!AlternativeV &&
2889 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2890 return V;
2891
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002892 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002893 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2894 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2895 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002896 PHI->addIncoming(
2897 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002898 return PHI;
2899}
2900
2901static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2902 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2903 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002904 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2905 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002906 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2907 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2908 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2909 };
2910
2911 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2912 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2913 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2914 if (!BB)
2915 return true;
2916 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2917 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2918 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002919 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002920 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002921 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2922 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2923 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2924 ++N;
2925 // Free instructions.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002926 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002927 continue;
2928 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002929 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002930 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002931 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2932 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2933 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002934 };
2935
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002936 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2937 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2938 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002939 return false;
2940
2941 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2942 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2943 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2944 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2945 // testing.
2946 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2947 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2948 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2949 return false;
2950
2951 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2952 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2953 return false;
2954
2955 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2956 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2957 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2958 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2959 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2960 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2961 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2962 //
2963 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2964 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2965 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2966 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2967 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2968 return false;
2969 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2970 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2971 return false;
2972 if (QTB)
2973 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2974 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2975 return false;
2976 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2977 I != E; ++I)
2978 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2979 return false;
2980
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002981 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2982 // sink the store.
2983 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2984 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2985 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2986 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2987 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2988 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2989 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2990 "condstore.split");
2991 if (!NewBB)
2992 return false;
2993 PostBB = NewBB;
2994 }
2995
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002996 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2997 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2998 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2999 ->getCondition();
3000 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3001 ->getCondition();
3002
3003 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3004 PStore->getParent());
3005 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3006 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3007
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003008 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3009
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003010 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3011 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3012
3013 if (InvertPCond)
3014 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3015 if (InvertQCond)
3016 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3017 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3018
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003019 auto *T =
3020 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003021 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3022 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3023 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3024 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3025 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3026 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003027 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3028 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3029 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3030 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3031 unsigned MinAlignment;
3032 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3033 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3034 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3035 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3036 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3037 // store that doesn't execute.
3038 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3039 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3040 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3041 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3042 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3043 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3044 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3045 } else {
3046 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3047 // the stored value.
3048 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3049 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003050
3051 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3052 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003053
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003054 return true;
3055}
3056
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003057static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3058 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003059 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3060 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3061 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3062 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3063 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3064 // PBI and QBI.
3065 //
3066 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3067 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3068 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3069 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3070 //
3071 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3072 //
3073 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3074 // / \ | \
3075 // PTB PFB | PFB
3076 // \ / | /
3077 // QBI QBI
3078 // / \ | \
3079 // QTB QFB | QFB
3080 // \ / | /
3081 // PostBB PostBB
3082 //
3083 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3084 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3085 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003086 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3087 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3088 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3089 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3090 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3091
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003092 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3093 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3094 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3095 PostBB = QFB;
3096
3097 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3098 if (!PostBB)
3099 return false;
3100
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003101 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3102 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3103 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3104 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3105 InvertPCond = true;
3106 }
3107 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3108 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3109 InvertQCond = true;
3110 }
3111
3112 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3113 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3114 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3115 PTB = nullptr;
3116 if (QTB == PostBB)
3117 QTB = nullptr;
3118
3119 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3120 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3121 // predecessor.
3122 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003123 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003124 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003125 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003126 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3127 return false;
3128 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3129 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3130 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003131 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003132 return false;
3133
3134 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3135 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003136 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003137 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3138 if (!BB)
3139 continue;
3140 for (auto &I : *BB)
3141 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3142 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3143 }
3144 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3145 if (!BB)
3146 continue;
3147 for (auto &I : *BB)
3148 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3149 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3150 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003151
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003152 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3153 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3154 // clear what it contains.
3155 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3156
3157 bool Changed = false;
3158 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3159 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003160 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003161 return Changed;
3162}
3163
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003164/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3165/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003166/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3167/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003168static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3169 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003170 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3171 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003172
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003173 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003174 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003175 // this conditional branch redundant.
3176 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3177 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3178 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3179 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3180 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3181 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3182 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003183 BI->setCondition(
3184 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3185 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003186 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003187
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003188 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3189 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3190 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3191 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003192 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003193 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3194 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3195 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003196 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3197 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3198 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003199 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003200 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003201 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3202 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003203 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3204 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003205 NewPN->addIncoming(
3206 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3207 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003208 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003209 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003210 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003211 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003213 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003214 return true;
3215 }
3216 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003217
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003218 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3219 if (CE->canTrap())
3220 return false;
3221
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003222 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3223 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3224 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003225 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003226 return true;
3227
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003228 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003229 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003230 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003231
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003232 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003233 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003234 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003235
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003236 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003237 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3238 PBIOp = 0;
3239 BIOp = 0;
3240 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3241 PBIOp = 0;
3242 BIOp = 1;
3243 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3244 PBIOp = 1;
3245 BIOp = 0;
3246 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3247 PBIOp = 1;
3248 BIOp = 1;
3249 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003251 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003253 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3254 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3255 // keep getting unwound.
3256 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3257 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003258
3259 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003260 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3261 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003262
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003263 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3264 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3265 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3266
3267 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003268 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003269 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3270 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003271 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3272 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003274 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3275 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3276 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3277 if (CE->canTrap())
3278 return false;
3279
3280 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3281 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3282 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3283 if (CE->canTrap())
3284 return false;
3285 }
3286
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003287 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003288 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003290 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3291 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003292
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003293 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3294 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3295 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3296 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3297 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3298 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3299 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3300 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3301 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3302 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003303 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3304 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003305 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3306 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003307 }
3308
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003309 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003310
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003311 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3312 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003313
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003314 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3315 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003316 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003317 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003318 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003319
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003320 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3321 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003322 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003323
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003324 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003325 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003326
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003327 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3328 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3329 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3330 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003331
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003332 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3333 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003334 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003335 bool HasWeights =
3336 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3337 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003338 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003339 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3340 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3341 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3342 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003343 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3344 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3345 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003346 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3347 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3348 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003349 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003350 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3351
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003352 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003353 }
3354
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003355 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3356 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003357 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003358
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003359 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3360 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3361 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3362 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003363 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3364 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3365 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3366 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003367 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3368 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003369 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3370 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003371 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003372 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3373 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3374 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3375 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003376 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003377 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3378 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3379 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3380 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3381 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3382 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3383 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3384 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3385
3386 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3387
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003388 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003389 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003390 }
3391 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003392
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003393 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3394 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003395
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003396 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3397 // one fewer predecessor.
3398 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003399}
3400
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003401// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3402// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003403// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3404// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3405// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3406static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003407 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3408 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003409 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003410 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3411 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3412 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3413 // successor.
3414 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003415 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003416
3417 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003418 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003419 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3420 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003421 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003423 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003424 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003425 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3426 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003427 }
3428
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003429 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3430 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3431
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003432 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003433 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003434 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3435 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3436 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003437 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003438 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003439 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3440 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003441 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3442 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003443 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003444 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003445 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3446 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3447 // terminator must be unreachable.
3448 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3449 } else {
3450 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3451 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3452 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003453 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003454 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003455 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003456 else
3457 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003458 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003459 }
3460
3461 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3462 return true;
3463}
3464
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003465// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003466// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3467// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3468// unconditional otherwise.
3469static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3470 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3471 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3472 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3473 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3474 return false;
3475
3476 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3477 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003478 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3479 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003480
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003481 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3482 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3483 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3484 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3485 if (HasWeights) {
3486 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3487 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003488 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003489 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003490 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003491 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003492 }
3493 }
3494
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003495 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003496 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3497 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003498}
3499
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003500// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003501// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3502// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3503// with
3504// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3505static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3506 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3507 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3508 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3509 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3510 return false;
3511
3512 // Extract the actual blocks.
3513 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3514 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3515
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003516 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003517 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3518 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003519}
3520
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003521/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3522/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003523/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3524/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3525/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3526/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3527/// like:
3528///
3529/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3530/// DEFAULT:
3531/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3532/// br label %end
3533/// end:
3534/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003535///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003536/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3537/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003538static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003539 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003540 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003541 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003542
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003543 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3544 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003545 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3546 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003547
3548 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3549 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003550
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003551 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3552 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3553 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3554 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003555 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3556 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003557
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003558 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3559 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3560 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003561
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003562 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3563 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3564 // away.
3565 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3566 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3567 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3568 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003569
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003570 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003571 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003572 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3573 }
3574 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003575 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003576 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003577
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003578 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3579 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3580 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003581 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003582 Value *V;
3583 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3584 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3585 else
3586 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003587
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003588 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3589 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3590 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003591 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003592 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003593
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003594 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3595 // the block.
3596 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003597 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003598 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003599 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3600 return false;
3601
3602 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3603 // true in the PHI.
3604 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003605 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003606
3607 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3608 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3609
3610 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3611 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3612 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3613 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3614
3615 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3616 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003617 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3618 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003619 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3620 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3621 if (HasWeights) {
3622 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3623 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3624 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003625 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003626 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3627
3628 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003629 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003630 }
3631 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003632 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003633
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003634 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003635 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3636 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3637 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003638 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3639 return true;
3640}
3641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003642/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003643/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3644/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003645static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3646 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003647 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003648 if (!Cond)
3649 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003650
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003651 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3652 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3653 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003654
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003655 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003656 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3657 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003658 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003659 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3660 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3661 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003662
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003663 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003664 if (!CompVal)
3665 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003666
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003667 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3668 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3669 return false;
3670
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003671 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3672
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003673 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3674 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3675 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3676 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003677
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003678 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003679 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003680 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3681 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003682
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003683 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3684 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3685
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003686 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3687 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003688 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3689 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3690 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003691
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003693
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003694 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3695 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3696 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003697
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003698 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3699 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3700 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3701 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003702 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3703 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003704 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3705 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003706 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3707
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003708 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003709 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003710 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003711 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003712
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003713 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003714
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003715 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3716 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003717 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003718
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003719 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3720 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003721 BB = NewBB;
3722 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003723
3724 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003725 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3726 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003727 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3728 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003729 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003730
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003731 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003732 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003733
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003734 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3735 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3736 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003737
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003738 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3739 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3740 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003741 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003742 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3743 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003744 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003745 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3746 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003747
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003748 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3749 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003750
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003751 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003752 return true;
3753}
3754
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003755bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003756 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3757 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3758 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3759 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3760 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3761 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003762
3763 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003764}
3765
3766// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3767bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3768 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3769
3770 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3771 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3772 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003773 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003774 while (++I != E)
3775 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3776 return false;
3777
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003778 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003779 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3780
3781 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003782 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3783 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003784 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3785 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3786
3787 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3788 // it has other dependents.
3789 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3790 continue;
3791
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003792 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003793 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3794 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3795 continue;
3796
3797 bool isTrivial = true;
3798
3799 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3800 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3801 while (++I != E)
3802 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3803 isTrivial = false;
3804 break;
3805 }
3806
3807 if (isTrivial)
3808 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3809 }
3810
3811 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003812 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3813 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003814
3815 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3816 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3817 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3818 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3819 // to remove them all.
3820 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3821 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3822
3823 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3824 PI != PE;) {
3825 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3826 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3827 }
3828
3829 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3830 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3831 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3832 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3833 // predecessors.
3834 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3835 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3836 }
3837
3838 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3839 if (pred_empty(BB))
3840 BB->eraseFromParent();
3841
3842 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3843}
3844
3845// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3846bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003847 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3848 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003849 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3850 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003851
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003852 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3853 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003854 while (++I != E)
3855 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3856 return false;
3857
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003858 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003859 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3860 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3861 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003862 }
3863
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003864 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3865 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003866 if (LoopHeaders)
3867 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003868 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003869}
3870
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003871static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003872 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3873 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3874 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3875 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3876 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3877 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3878 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3879 // simplified.
3880 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003881 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3882 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003883 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3884 return false;
3885
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003886 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3887 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3888 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3889 return false;
3890
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003891 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003892 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003893 while (++I != E) {
3894 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3895 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003896 return false;
3897
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003898 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3899 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3900 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3901 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003902 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003903 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3904 break;
3905 default:
3906 return false;
3907 }
3908 }
3909
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003910 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3911 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003912 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003913 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003914
3915 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3916 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3917 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3918 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3919 // are both EH pads).
3920 if (UnwindDest) {
3921 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3922 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003923 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003924 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003925 I != IE; ++I) {
3926 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003927
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003928 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003929 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003930 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003931 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3932 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3933 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3934 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3935 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3936 // pad being removed.
3937 //
3938 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3939 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3940 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3941 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3942 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3943 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3944
3945 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3946 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3947
3948 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3949 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3950 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3951 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003952 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003953 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003954 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3955 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3956 }
3957 } else {
3958 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3959 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3960 // predecessors with this value.
3961 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3962 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3963 }
3964 }
3965 }
3966
3967 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003968 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003969 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3970 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003971 I != IE;) {
3972 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3973 // being moved to another block.
3974 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3975 if (PN->use_empty())
3976 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3977 // when we erase BB below.
3978 continue;
3979
3980 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3981 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3982 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3983 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3984 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3985 if (pred != BB)
3986 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3987 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3988 }
3989 }
3990
3991 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3992 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3993 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003994 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003995 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003996 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003997 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003998 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003999 }
4000 }
4001
4002 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4003 BB->eraseFromParent();
4004 return true;
4005}
4006
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004007// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4008static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4009 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4010 // with.
4011 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4012 if (!UnwindDest)
4013 return false;
4014
4015 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4016 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4017 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4018 return false;
4019
4020 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4021 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4022 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4023 return false;
4024
4025 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4026 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4027 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4028 // funclet bundle operands.
4029 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4030 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4031 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4032 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4033 // destination.
4034 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4035 RI->eraseFromParent();
4036
4037 return true;
4038}
4039
4040bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004041 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4042 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4043 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4044 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4045 return false;
4046
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004047 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004048 return true;
4049
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004050 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004051 return true;
4052
4053 return false;
4054}
4055
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004056bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004057 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004058 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4059 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004060
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004061 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004062 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4063 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004064 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4065 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4067 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4068 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4069 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4070 else
4071 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4072 }
4073 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004076 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004077 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4078 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004079 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4080 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004081 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004082 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004083
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004084 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004085 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004086 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4087 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004088 if (LoopHeaders)
4089 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004090 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004091
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004092 return true;
4093 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004095 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4096 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4097 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4098 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4099 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004100
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004101 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4102 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4103 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004104 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004105 return true;
4106 }
4107 return false;
4108}
4109
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004110bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4111 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004112
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004113 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004114
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004115 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4116 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004117 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4118 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004119 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004120 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4121 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4122 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004123 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4124 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004125
4126 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004127 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004128 if (SI->isVolatile())
4129 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004130 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004131 if (LI->isVolatile())
4132 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004133 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004134 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4135 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004136 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004137 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4138 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004139 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4140 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4141 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4142 // default.
4143 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4144 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4145 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4146 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004147 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4148 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004149 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004150 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004151 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4152 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4153 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4154 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004155 }
4156
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004157 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4158 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4159 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004160 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004161 Changed = true;
4162 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004163
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004164 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4165 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004166 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4167 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004168
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004169 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004170 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4171 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004172 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004173 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004174 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4175 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4176 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4177 TI->eraseFromParent();
4178 Changed = true;
4179 }
4180 } else {
4181 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004182 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004183 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4184 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004185 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004186 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4187 Changed = true;
4188 }
4189 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004190 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004191 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004192 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004193 ++i;
4194 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004195 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004196 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4197 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4198 e = SI->case_end();
4199 Changed = true;
4200 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004201 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4202 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4203 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4204 Changed = true;
4205 }
4206 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4207 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4208 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4209 Changed = true;
4210 continue;
4211 }
4212
4213 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4214 E = CSI->handler_end();
4215 I != E; ++I) {
4216 if (*I == BB) {
4217 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4218 --I;
4219 --E;
4220 Changed = true;
4221 }
4222 }
4223 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4224 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4225 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4226 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4227 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4228 } else {
4229 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4230 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4231 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4232 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4233 }
4234 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4235 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4236 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4237 Changed = true;
4238 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004239 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004240 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4241 TI->eraseFromParent();
4242 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004243 }
4244 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004245
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004246 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004247 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004248 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4249 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004250 if (LoopHeaders)
4251 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004252 return true;
4253 }
4254
4255 return Changed;
4256}
4257
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004258static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4259 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4260
4261 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4262 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4263 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4264 return false;
4265 }
4266 return true;
4267}
4268
4269/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4270/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004271static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004272 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004273
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004274 bool HasDefault =
4275 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004276
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004277 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4278 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4279 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004280 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4281 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004283 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4284 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004285 if (!DestA)
4286 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004287 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004288 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004289 continue;
4290 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004291 if (!DestB)
4292 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004293 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004294 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004295 continue;
4296 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004297 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004298 }
4299
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004300 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4301 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004302 assert(DestA != DestB);
4303 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4304 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4305 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4306
4307 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4308 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4309 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4310 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4311 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4312 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4313 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4314 OtherDest = DestB;
4315 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4316 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4317 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4318 OtherDest = DestA;
4319 } else
4320 return false;
4321
4322 // Start building the compare and branch.
4323
4324 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004325 Constant *NumCases =
4326 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004327
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004328 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4329 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004330 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4331
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004332 Value *Cmp;
4333 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004334 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004335 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4336 else
4337 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004338 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004339
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004340 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004341 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4342 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004343 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4344 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004345 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4346 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4347 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4348 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4349 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4350 else
4351 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4352 }
4353 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4354 TrueWeight /= 2;
4355 FalseWeight /= 2;
4356 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004357 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004358 }
4359 }
4360
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004361 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4362 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4363 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004364 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4365 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004366 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004367 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4368 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004369 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4370 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004371 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4372 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004373 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4374 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4375 }
4376
4377 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004378 SI->eraseFromParent();
4379
4380 return true;
4381}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004382
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004383/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004384/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004385static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004386 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004387 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004388 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004389 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004390
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004391 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4392 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4393 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004394 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004395 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4396
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004397 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004398 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004399 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004400 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004401 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004402 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004403 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004404 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4405 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004406 }
4407 }
4408
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004409 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4410 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004411 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4412 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004413 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004414 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4415 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004416 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004417 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004418 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004419 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004420 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004421 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004422 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4423 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004424 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4425 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004426 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4427 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4428 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4429 return true;
4430 }
4431
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004432 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4433 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4434 if (HasWeight) {
4435 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4436 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4437 }
4438
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004439 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004440 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004441 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4442 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004443 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004444 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004445 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004446 Weights.pop_back();
4447 }
4448
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004449 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004450 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4451 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004452 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004453 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004454 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004455 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004456 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004457
4458 return !DeadCases.empty();
4459}
4460
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004461/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4462/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004463/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4464/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4465/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4466static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004467 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004468 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004469 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004470 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004471 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004472
4473 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4474 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004475 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004476
4477 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4478
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004479 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4480 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004481 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4482
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004483 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004484 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4485 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004486
4487 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004488 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004489 }
4490
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004491 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004492}
4493
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004494/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4495/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004496/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004497static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004498 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4499
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004500 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004501 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4502 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004503 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004504 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4505 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004506
4507 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4508 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4509 // switchbb:
4510 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4511 // i32 17, label %succ
4512 // ...
4513 // succ:
4514 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4515 // -->
4516 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4517
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004518 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004519 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4520 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4521 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4522 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4523 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004524 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4525 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4526 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4527 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004528 Changed = true;
4529 }
4530 }
4531
4532 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004533 int PhiIdx;
4534 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4535 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004536 }
4537
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004538 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4539 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4540 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004541 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4542 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004543
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004544 for (int Index : Indexes)
4545 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004546 Changed = true;
4547 }
4548
4549 return Changed;
4550}
4551
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004552/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004553/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004554static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004555 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4556 return false;
4557 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4558 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004559
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004560 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4561 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4562 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4563 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004564
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004565 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004566 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4567 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004568 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4569 return false;
4570 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004571
4572 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4573 return false;
4574
4575 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004576}
4577
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004578/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004579/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004580static Constant *
4581LookupConstant(Value *V,
4582 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004583 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4584 return C;
4585 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4586}
4587
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004588/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004589/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4590/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004591/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004592static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004593ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4594 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004595 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004596 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4597 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004598 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004599 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4600 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4601 if (A->isNullValue())
4602 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004603 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004604 }
4605
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004606 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4607 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4608 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4609 COps.push_back(A);
4610 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004611 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004612 }
4613
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004614 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004615 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4616 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004617 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004618
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004619 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004620}
4621
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004622/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004623/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004624/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004625/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004626static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004627GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004628 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004629 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004630 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004631 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4632 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4633
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004634 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4635 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004636 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004637 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004638 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
4639 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(&I)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004640 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004641 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004642 return false;
4643 Pred = CaseDest;
4644 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004645 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004646 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004647
4648 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4649 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4650 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004651 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004652 User *User = Use.getUser();
4653 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4654 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4655 continue;
4656 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4657 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4658 continue;
4659 return false;
4660 }
4661
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004662 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004663 } else {
4664 break;
4665 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004666 }
4667
4668 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4669 if (!*CommonDest)
4670 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4671 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4672 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4673 return false;
4674
4675 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004676 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4677 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004678 if (Idx == -1)
4679 continue;
4680
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004681 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004682 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004683 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004684 return false;
4685
4686 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004687 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004688 return false;
4689
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004690 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004691 }
4692
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004693 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004694}
4695
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004696// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004697// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4698static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4699 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4700 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004701 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4702 if (I.first == Result) {
4703 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004704 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004705 }
4706 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004707 UniqueResults.push_back(
4708 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004709 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004710}
4711
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004712// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004713// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4714// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4715// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004716static bool
4717InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4718 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4719 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4720 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4721 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004722 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4723 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4724
4725 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4726 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4727 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004728 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004729 return false;
4730
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004731 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004732 if (Results.size() > 1)
4733 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004734
4735 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4736 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4737 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4738
4739 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4740 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4741 return false;
4742
4743 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4744 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4745 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004746
4747 // Check the PHI consistency.
4748 if (!PHI)
4749 PHI = Results[0].first;
4750 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4751 return false;
4752 }
4753 // Find the default result value.
4754 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4755 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4756 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004757 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004758 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4759 // is unreachable.
4760 DefaultResult =
4761 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4762 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004763 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004764 return false;
4765
4766 return true;
4767}
4768
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004769// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4770// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004771// Example:
4772// switch (a) {
4773// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4774// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4775// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4776// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4777// default:
4778// return 4;
4779// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004780static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4781 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4782 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004783 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004784 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004785 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4786 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4787 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4788 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4789 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4790 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4791
4792 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4793 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4794 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4795 Value *const ValueCompare =
4796 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4797 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4798 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4799 }
4800 Value *const ValueCompare =
4801 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004802 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4803 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004804 }
4805
4806 return nullptr;
4807}
4808
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004809// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4810// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004811static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4812 Value *SelectValue,
4813 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4814 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4815 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4816 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4817 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4818
4819 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4820
4821 // Remove the switch.
4822 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4823 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4824
4825 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4826 continue;
4827 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4828 }
4829 SI->eraseFromParent();
4830}
4831
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004832/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004833/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4834/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004835static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4836 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004837 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004838 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4839 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4840 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4841 Constant *DefaultResult;
4842 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4843 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004844 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004845 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004846 return false;
4847 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4848 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4849 return false;
4850 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4851
4852 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004853 Value *SelectValue =
4854 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004855 if (SelectValue) {
4856 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4857 return true;
4858 }
4859 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4860 return false;
4861}
4862
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004863namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004864
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004865/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4866class SwitchLookupTable {
4867public:
4868 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4869 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4870 SwitchLookupTable(
4871 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4872 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004873 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004874
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004875 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4876 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4877 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004878
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004879 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4880 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4881 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4882 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004883
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004884private:
4885 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4886 // different ways.
4887 enum {
4888 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4889 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4890 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004891
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004892 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4893 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4894 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4895 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004896
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004897 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4898 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4899 // shift and mask operations.
4900 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004901
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004902 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4903 // instructions from the table.
4904 ArrayKind
4905 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004906
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004907 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004908 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004909
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004910 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004911 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4912 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004913
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004914 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004915 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4916 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004918 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004919 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004920};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004921
4922} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004923
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004924SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4925 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4926 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004927 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004928 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4929 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004930
4931 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004932 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004933
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004934 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4935
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004936 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004937 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004938 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4939 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4940 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004941 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004942
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004943 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004944 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4945
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004946 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004947 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004948 }
4949
4950 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004951 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004952 assert(DefaultValue &&
4953 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004954 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004955 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4956 if (!TableContents[I])
4957 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004958 }
4959
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004960 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004961 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004962 }
4963
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004964 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4965 // that single value.
4966 if (SingleValue) {
4967 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4968 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004969 }
4970
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004971 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4972 // table index.
4973 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4974 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4975 APInt PrevVal;
4976 APInt DistToPrev;
4977 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4978 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4979 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4980 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4981 if (!ConstVal) {
4982 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4983 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4984 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4985 break;
4986 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004987 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004988 if (I != 0) {
4989 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4990 if (I == 1) {
4991 DistToPrev = Dist;
4992 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4993 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4994 break;
4995 }
4996 }
4997 PrevVal = Val;
4998 }
4999 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5000 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5001 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5002 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5003 ++NumLinearMaps;
5004 return;
5005 }
5006 }
5007
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005008 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005009 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005010 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005011 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5012 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5013 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005014 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5015 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5016 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5017 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5018 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005019 }
5020 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5021 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5022 Kind = BitMapKind;
5023 ++NumBitMaps;
5024 return;
5025 }
5026
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005027 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005028 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005029 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5030
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005031 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5032 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005033 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005034 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005035 Kind = ArrayKind;
5036}
5037
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005038Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005039 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005040 case SingleValueKind:
5041 return SingleValue;
5042 case LinearMapKind: {
5043 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5044 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5045 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5046 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5047 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5048 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5049 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5050 return Result;
5051 }
5052 case BitMapKind: {
5053 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5054 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005055
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005056 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5057 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5058 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5059 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005060
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005061 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5062 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5063 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5064 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005065
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005066 // Shift down.
5067 Value *DownShifted =
5068 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5069 // Mask off.
5070 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5071 }
5072 case ArrayKind: {
5073 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5074 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5075 uint64_t TableSize =
5076 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5077 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5078 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5079 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5080 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005081
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005082 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5083 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5084 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5085 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5086 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005087 }
5088 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5089}
5090
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005091bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005092 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005093 Type *ElementType) {
5094 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005095 if (!IT)
5096 return false;
5097 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5098 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005099
5100 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005101 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005102 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005103 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005104}
5105
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005106/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5107/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005108static bool
5109ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5110 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5111 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005112 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5113 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005114
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005115 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005116 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005117 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5118 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005119
5120 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005121 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005122
5123 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005124 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5125 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5126 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005127
5128 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5129 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5130 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5131 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005132 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005133 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005134
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005135 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5136 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5137 return true;
5138
5139 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5140 if (HasIllegalType)
5141 return false;
5142
5143 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5144 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5145 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5146 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005147}
5148
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005149/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5150/// \code
5151/// if (idx < tablesize)
5152/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5153/// else
5154/// r = default_value;
5155/// if (r != default_value)
5156/// ...
5157/// \endcode
5158/// Is optimized to:
5159/// \code
5160/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5161/// if (cond)
5162/// r = table[idx];
5163/// else
5164/// r = default_value;
5165/// if (cond)
5166/// ...
5167/// \endcode
5168/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005169static void reuseTableCompare(
5170 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5171 Constant *DefaultValue,
5172 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005173 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5174 if (!CmpInst)
5175 return;
5176
5177 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5178 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5179 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5180 return;
5181
5182 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5183 if (!CmpOp1)
5184 return;
5185
5186 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5187 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5188 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5189
5190 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5191 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5192 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5193 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5194 return;
5195
5196 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5197 // compare result.
5198 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5199 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005200 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005201 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005202 return;
5203 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5204 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5205 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005206
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005207 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5208 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5209 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5210 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5211 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5212 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5213 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5214 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5215 return;
5216 }
5217
5218 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5219 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5220 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5221 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5222 } else {
5223 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005224 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5225 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5226 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005227 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5228 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5229 }
5230}
5231
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005232/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5233/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5234/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005235static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5236 const DataLayout &DL,
5237 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005238 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005239
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005240 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5241 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5242 // attribute is not set.
5243 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5244 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005245 return false;
5246
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005247 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5248 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5249
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005250 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5251 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5252 // string and lookup indices into that.
5253
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005254 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005255 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005256 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005257 return false;
5258
5259 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005260 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005261 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5262 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005263 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5264 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005265
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005266 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005267
5268 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005269 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005270
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005271 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5272 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5273 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005274
5275 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005276 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005277 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5278 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5279 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5280 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5281
5282 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005283 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005284 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005285 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005286 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005287 return false;
5288
5289 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005290 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5291 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5292 Constant *Value = I.second;
5293 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5294 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5295 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005296 }
5297 }
5298
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005299 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005300 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005301 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5302 }
5303
5304 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5305 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5306 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5307 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5308
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005309 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5310 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005311 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005312 bool HasDefaultResults =
5313 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5314 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005315
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005316 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5317 if (NeedMask) {
5318 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005319 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005320 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005321 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005322 return false;
5323 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005324
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005325 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5326 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5327 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005328 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005329 }
5330
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005331 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005332 return false;
5333
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005334 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005335 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005336 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5337 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005338
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005339 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005340 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005341 Value *TableIndex;
5342 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5343 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5344 else
5345 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5346 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005347
5348 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5349 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005350 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005351 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005352 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5353 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5354 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5355
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005356 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5357 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5358 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5359 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5360 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5361 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005362 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5363
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005364 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005365 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005366 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5367 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005368 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005369 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5370 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5371 RangeCheckBranch =
5372 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005373 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005374
5375 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5376 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005377
5378 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005379 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5380 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005381 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5382 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005383 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5384 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005385
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005386 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005387 // unnecessary illegal types.
5388 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5389 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5390 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005391 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005392 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5393 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005394 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5395 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005396 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5397 }
5398 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5399
5400 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5401 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5402 // else continue with table lookup.
5403 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005404 Value *MaskIndex =
5405 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5406 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5407 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5408 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005409 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5410
5411 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5412 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5413 }
5414
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005415 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005416 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005417 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5418 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5419 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5420 }
5421
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005422 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005423 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005424 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005425
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005426 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5427 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005428 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005429 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5430 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005431
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005432 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005433
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005434 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5435 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005436 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5437 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005438 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5439 ReturnedEarly = true;
5440 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005441 }
5442
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005443 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5444 // possible.
5445 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5446 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5447 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5448 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5449 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5450 }
5451 }
5452
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005453 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005454 }
5455
5456 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5457 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5458
5459 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005460 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005461 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005462
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005463 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005464 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005465 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5466 }
5467 SI->eraseFromParent();
5468
5469 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005470 if (NeedMask)
5471 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005472 return true;
5473}
5474
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005475static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5476 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5477 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5478 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5479 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5480 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5481 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005482
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005483 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5484}
5485
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005486/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5487/// of cases.
5488///
5489/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5490/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5491///
5492/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5493/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005494static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5495 const DataLayout &DL,
5496 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5497 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5498 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5499 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5500 return false;
5501 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5502 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5503 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5504 return false;
5505
5506 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5507 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5508 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5509 // as signed.
5510 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5511 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5512 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Mandeep Singh Grang636d94d2018-04-13 19:47:57 +00005513 llvm::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005514
5515 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5516 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5517 return false;
5518
5519 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5520 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5521 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005522 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005523
5524 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5525 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5526 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5527 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5528 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005529 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005530
5531 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5532 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5533 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5534 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5535 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5536 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5537 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5538 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005539 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005540 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5541 return false;
5542
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005543 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005544 for (auto &V : Values)
5545 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5546
5547 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5548 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5549 return false;
5550
5551 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5552 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5553 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5554 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5555 //
5556 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5557 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5558 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5559 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005560
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005561 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5562 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5563 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5564 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005565 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5566 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5567 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005568 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5569
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005570 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5571 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005572 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005573 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005574 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005575 }
5576 return true;
5577}
5578
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005579bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005580 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5581
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005582 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5583 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5584 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5585 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5586 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005587 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005588
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005589 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5590 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5591 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005592 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005593
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005594 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5595 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005596 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005597 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005598 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005599 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005600
5601 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005602 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005603 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005604
5605 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005606 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
5607 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005608
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005609 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5610 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005611
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005612 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005613 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005614
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005615 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5616 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5617 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5618 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5619 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005620 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5621 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005622 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005623
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005624 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005625 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005626
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005627 return false;
5628}
5629
5630bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5631 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5632 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005633
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005634 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5635 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5636 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5637 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005638 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005639 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5640 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005641 --i;
5642 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005643 Changed = true;
5644 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005645 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005646
5647 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5648 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5649 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5650 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5651 return true;
5652 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005653
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005654 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5655 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5656 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5657 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5658 return true;
5659 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005660
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005661 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5662 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005663 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005664 }
5665 return Changed;
5666}
5667
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005668/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5669/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5670/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5671/// a shared handler.
5672///
5673/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5674/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5675/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5676/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5677/// sinking in this file)
5678///
5679/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5680/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5681/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5682/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5683/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5684/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5685///
5686/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5687/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5688/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5689static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5690 BasicBlock *BB) {
5691 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5692 assert(Succ);
5693 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5694 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5695 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5696 return false;
5697
5698 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5699 if (BB == OtherPred)
5700 continue;
5701 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5702 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5703 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5704 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005705 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5706 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005707 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5708 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5709 continue;
5710
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005711 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005712 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5713 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5714 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5715 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5716 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005717 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5718 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005719 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5720 }
5721
5722 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5723 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005724 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5725 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5726 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005727 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5728 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5729 }
5730
5731 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5732 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5733 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5734 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5735 }
5736
5737 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5738 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5739 BI->eraseFromParent();
5740 return true;
5741 }
5742 return false;
5743}
5744
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005745bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5746 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005747 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005748 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005749
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005750 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005751 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5752 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005753 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5754 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005755 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5756 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005757 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005758 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00005759 (LoopHeaders && pred_size(BB) > 1 &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005760 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005761 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005762 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005763 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005765
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005766 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5767 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005768 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5769 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5770 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5771 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005772 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005773 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005774 return true;
5775 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005776
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005777 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5778 // equivalent.
5779 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005780 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5781 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005782 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005783 return true;
5784 }
5785
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005786 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5787 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5788 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5789 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005790 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005791 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005792 return false;
5793}
5794
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005795static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5796 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5797 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5798 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5799 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5800 return nullptr;
5801 PredPred = PPred;
5802 }
5803 return PredPred;
5804}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005805
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005806bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005807 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005808 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5809 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5810 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005811
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005812 // Conditional branch
5813 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5814 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5815 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5816 // switch.
5817 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005818 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005819 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005820
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005821 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5822 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005823 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005824 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005825 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005826 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005827 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005828 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005829 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005830 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005831 }
5832 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005833
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005834 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005835 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005836 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005837
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005838 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5839 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5840 // of the BI branch.
5841 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5842 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5843 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005844 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5845 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005846 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005847 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005848 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005849 if (Implication) {
5850 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5851 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5852 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5853 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5854 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5855 BI->setCondition(CI);
5856 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005857 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005858 }
5859 }
5860 }
5861
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005862 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5863 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5864 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005865 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005866 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005867
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005868 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5869 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5870 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5871 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005872 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5873 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005874 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005875 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005876 } else {
5877 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005878 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005879 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5880 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5881 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005882 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005883 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005884 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005885 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005886 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005887 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005888 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5889 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5890 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005891 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005892 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005893 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005894
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005895 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5896 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5897 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5898 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005899 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
5900 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005901
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005902 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005903 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5904 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005905 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005906 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005907 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005908
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005909 // Look for diamond patterns.
5910 if (MergeCondStores)
5911 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5912 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5913 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005914 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005915 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005916
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005917 return false;
5918}
5919
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005920/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5921static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5922 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5923 if (!C)
5924 return false;
5925
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005926 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005927 return false;
5928
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005929 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005930 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005931 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005932
5933 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5934 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005935 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5936 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5937 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5938 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005939 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005940 return false;
5941
5942 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5943 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5944 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5945 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5946
5947 // Look through bitcasts.
5948 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5949 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5950
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005951 // Load from null is undefined.
5952 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005953 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5954 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005955
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005956 // Store to null is undefined.
5957 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005958 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005959 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5960 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005961
5962 // A call to null is undefined.
5963 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5964 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005965 }
5966 return false;
5967}
5968
5969/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005970/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005971static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005972 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5973 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5974 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
5975 TerminatorInst *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005976 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5977 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005978 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005979 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5980 // destination from conditional branches.
5981 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5982 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5983 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005984 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5985 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005986 BI->eraseFromParent();
5987 return true;
5988 }
5989 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5990 }
5991
5992 return false;
5993}
5994
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005995bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005996 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005997
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005998 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005999 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006000
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006001 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6002 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006003 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006004 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006005 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006006 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6007 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006008 }
6009
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006010 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6011 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006012 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006013
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006014 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6015 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6016
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006017 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6018 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6019
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006020 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6021 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6022 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006023 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6024 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006025
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006026 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6027 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6028
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006029 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6030
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006031 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6032 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006033 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006034 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006035 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006036
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006037 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006038 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006039 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006040 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6041 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006042 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006043 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6044 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006045 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006046 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006047 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6048 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006049 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006050 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6051 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006052 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006053 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6054 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006055 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006056 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6057 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006058 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006059 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6060 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006061 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006062 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6063 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006064 }
6065
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006066 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006067}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006068
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006069bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6070 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006071 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006072 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006073 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006074 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006075}